Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneM6100

مﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟا ﻞﻴﻟد

❙

M6100

❙

P/N : MMBB0188408 (1.0)

LG Electronics Inc.

مﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟا ﻞﻴﻟد |

M6100

ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟا اﺬﻫ ﻲﻓ ةدﻮﺟﻮﻤﻟا تﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟا ﺾﻌﺑ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﺗ ﺪﻗ

.ﺔﻣﺪﺨﻟا ﺮﻓﻮﻣ وأ ﻒﺗﺎﻬﻟا ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺑ ﻰﻟإ

ادﺎﻨﺘﺳا ﻚﻟذو ﻚﻔﺗﺎﻫ ﻦﻋ

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﺳرﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﺳرﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

M6100

USER’S GUIDE

Some of contents in this manual may differ from your

phone depending on the software of the phone or your

service provider.

P/N : MMBB0188408 (1.0)

Summary of content (265 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎرﺳ‬ ENGLISH ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎرﺳ‬ ENGLISH ❙ M6100 ❙ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ وذﻟﻚ اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا ً إﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻣﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ P/N : MMBB0188408 (1.0) LG Electronics Inc. ‫ | دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬M6100 | | M6100 | USER’S GUIDE P/N : MMBB0188408 (1.0) Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 2
‫ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪ M 6 1 0 0‬دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ وذﻟﻚ اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا ً إﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻣﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت |‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ادوات‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻲ ت اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮدم‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬
PAGE 4
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎذج‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮري‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SIM‬اﻋﺘﻤﺎدا ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪83
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ |‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ M6100‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷداء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم وﺻﻐﺮ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪث ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﻜﻞ دﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷداء وﺗﺠﻨﺐ إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﺳﻮء‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎك‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﻮر اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮة أو ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪك ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫وﻣﻌﺪل اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ M6100‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮوط ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل |‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ أﺟﺰاء ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎل اﻹﺻﻼح‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻟﺬﻫﺎب إﻟﻰ أﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ أو اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺤﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ أو أﻓﺮان اﻟﻄﺒﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮط اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰازات اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت‪.
PAGE 8
‫اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬ ‫اﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ واﻟﻠﻮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮد ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪوﻳًﺎً أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎدة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻋﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻴﺪوي )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬إذا‬ ‫ﻛﺎن ذﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﺮاً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ إﺟﺮاء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أو اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ إذا ﻣﺎ اﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل |‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪوث ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ )ﺗﺸﻮش(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق )إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﺠﻮال ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺼﻌﻮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ وأﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة ﺑﺪون اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﺰاء ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 10
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷداء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﺰم اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫أ ﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة‬ ‫زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ وﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ دورات اﻟﻤﻴﺎه‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮك اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺤﺎرة أو اﻟﺒﺎردة‪ ،‬ﻷن ذﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ أداﺋﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪M6100‬‬ ‫أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫• ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‪MP3 /‬‬ ‫ا ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ وﺟﻮد أﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮدة‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻟﻔﻼش‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﺰام اﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ .4‬زر ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬أﻃﺮاف ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫وﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮق‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮةً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ إﻟﻰ آﺧﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻮاردة‪ .
PAGE 14
‫‪ .6‬ا ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮان رﻣﻮز ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮاﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫وﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت وﻳﺐ واﻟﺼﻮر وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺧﻼل اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫وﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮق‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮةً‪..‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ وﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻹﺟﺮاءات‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺤﺬف ﺣﺮف ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪم اﻟﺠﺪول أدﻧﺎه ﺷﺮ ًﺣﺎ ﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮات اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪❈ .‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻮاﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫❈ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻤﺤﺎدﺛﺔ* اﻋﺘﻤﺎدا ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮاﺟﻪ ﻛﺘﻤﺎً ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻧﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎً ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﺳﻴﺌﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ أﺧﺬ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪M6100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا أو اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• أ ﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮن‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 17
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ادﻓﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻔﻞ إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬اﻵن ارﻓﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫وأن اﺗﺠﺎه ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ واﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬واﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ادﻓﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎع‬ ‫ﺻﻮت ﺗﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻞ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻮى ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻛﺘﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 19
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ |‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ا ﻧﺰع ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﺤﺎدة ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻴﻮاﻧﺎت واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ أن‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮي ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أو ﺗﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺆدي ﻫﺬا إﻟﻰ ﺣﺪوث ﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة )ﻣﺎس ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ و‪/‬أو اﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪوث‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺼﺪر ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ أو ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻻﻋﺔ أو ﻃﻘﻢ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻴﺪوي ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ .‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ E‬ﻟﺜﻮان ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻋﺪاد ﻃﻠﺐ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،PIN code‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻀﻄﺮ إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ E‬ﻟﺜﻮان ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ‪) PIN2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬أرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬أرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰم رﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN2‬واﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪ ،SIM‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻹﺧﻄﺎر ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ورﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮم رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻛﻮد اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ )‪(C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل )‪ (S‬ﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﻬﺎء )‪ (E‬أو‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح )‪ ،(S‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ آﺧﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة واﻟﻮاردة وﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ )[( ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫وﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ L‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮف ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺮف واﺣﺪ‪ .‬وﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪا ً ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫)أ ب ج(‪ .‬وﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺺ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‪.
PAGE 25
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬ ‫اﻛﺘﺐ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ رﻗﻢ ﻳﺮاد‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪.‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼت اﻟﻨﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ #‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ T9‬واﻟﻤﻌﺮوف ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻗﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ‬ ‫أﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 26
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫• إذا ﻇﻠﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة أو ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 8237‬ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫واﺛﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪] 8237‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻓﻘﺪت اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً وﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺮوف‬ ‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ أ ب ت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم وﺿﻊ أ ب ت )اﻟﺤﺮوف(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم‬ ‫ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮع واﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﺤﺮف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻷول‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎن ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• وﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺤﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪ 0‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬف أي ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮوف‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪ .C‬اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل(‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺮاد إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫وذﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﺪوﻳﺎً إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺣﺮف إﻟﻰ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح )‪.(#‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﺑﺤﺚ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﺎﺳﻢ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ ،‬وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة أو إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.[4.3.7‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وذﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S‬أو ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر واﻟﺮد"‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف أو اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺪرة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬إﺣﺪاﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ واﻷﺧﺮى ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬وﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺑﺪء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ اﻟﺬي ﺑﺪأ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أﺧﺮى أو ﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ أو ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫)وﻫﺬا ﻣﻌﻨﺎه إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻤﺮار وﺟﻮد اﻻﺗﺼﺎل(‪ .
PAGE 31
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﺧﻴﺎر ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫إﺷﺮاك اﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎر ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺧﺎص وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪ 1‬اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺎم‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ادوات‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫‪ 3‬اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪ 5‬اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻟﻤﻮدم‬ ‫‪ 5‬اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﻤﺎذج‬
PAGE 33
‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ |‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪MP3 1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻮري‬ ‫‪ 5‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 3‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 4‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬إﻋﺪادات ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫‪ 3‬اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬
PAGE 34
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎﻻت اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰة ]>[ و ]<[‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮض وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫اﻻوﺿﺎع |‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻮال ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻷﺣﺪاث واﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎت وﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎك ﺧﻤﺴﺔ أوﺿﺎع ﻣﻌﺪة ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ وﻫﻲ‪" :‬اﻫﺘﺰاز‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ" و"ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" و"ﻋﺎم" و"ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﻟﻲ" و"ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس"‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ اﻷوﺿﺎع اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ "اﻷوﺿﺎع" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وأﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.×.1‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 36
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ أي اﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪه ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع "اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻓﻘﻂ" و"ﺻﺎﻣﺖ"‬ ‫و"ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن"‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﺻﻮات اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮات‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬داﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ واﻻﺳﻢ )إن وﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ إﺟﺮاء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮض أوﻗﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮده واﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ أو ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ "اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" و"اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ"‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة وﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت دﻓﻌﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.2‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬واﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺪة آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.5.
PAGE 39
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.5.2‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ وﺳﻌﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻌﺎر‬ ‫وﺣﺪات اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ أو اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫وﺣﺪات ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪدت ﻗﺮاءة‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪدت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺪق‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل وﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺘﻜﺮار‪ :‬ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬اﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬اﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬اﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺴﺒﺖ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﻤﻴﺲ ‪ ،‬اﻟﺴﺒﺖ اﻟﻰ اﻻرﺑﻌﺎء ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻮم‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫<]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.
PAGE 41
‫ادوات‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫ادوات |‬ ‫اﺟﻬﺰة ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.2.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.2.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫وإذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ أﺿﻔﺖ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور )ﻋﺎدة ‪.(0000‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.
PAGE 42
‫ﻳُﺤ ّﻮل أﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻮﺣﺪات ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫<]وﺣﺪات[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.DU‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻤﺪن اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ اﻟﻜﺒﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‪.L, R,‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ل ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪدﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎ زك ﻟﻠﺮد اﻻ ﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎم‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.6.
PAGE 43
‫ادوات |‬ ‫ادوات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ّ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻺﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫إﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪاﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺠّ ﻠﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.6.3‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ وﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ أن ﺗﺼﻐﻲ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ أن ﺗﺤﺬف رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫اﻟﻤﻮدم‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.3‬‬ ‫ادوات‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﻮدم‪ .‬وإذا ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ ،PCsync‬أو ‪ ،Contents banks‬أو ‪Internet‬‬ ‫‪ ،Cube‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻮدم ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ |‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫>]أﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫)اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد "ﺑﺤﺚ" ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫<]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ أو ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻔﻮري ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮف‬ ‫اﻷول ﻟﻼﺳﻢ أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻷوﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻮد اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إدﺧﺎل دﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 1000‬إدﺧﺎل‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪد‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺮوف ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻓﺘﺢ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]أﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬أو‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه أن ﻳﻜﻮن رﻗﻤﺎً رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫أ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ب‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ< ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ج‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ |‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.1.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل ﻷي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ 2‬إﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .9‬وﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻓﺘﺢ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أوﻻ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >]أﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد <]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد )ﻓﺎرغ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ‪،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬وﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﺎﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻹدﺧﺎل‬ ‫وﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أوﻻ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >]أﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬ ‫ﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ |‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫• رﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.1.4‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻓﺘﺢ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أوﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ> ]أﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫<]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ D,U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪]S‬إرﺳﺎل[‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻴﻮم واﻟﺸﻬﺮ واﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺟﺪول ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺠﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺬي ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫<]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.2.4‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪول ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻴﻮم اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع واﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ <]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.2.
PAGE 51
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ |‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫<]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ <]إﺿﺎﻓﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫إ ذا أردت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪#‬اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺳﺘﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ اﻟﻤﻴﻼدي او اﻟﻬﺠﺮي او اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 52
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )<( وﺣﺪد ‪Messages‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ إﺷﻌﺎر اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ وﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة )‪.(SMS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ و ‪ SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪل ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﺮﻣﺰ " " ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺘﻼم ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺪل ﻇﻬﻮر‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ " " ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ .
PAGE 53
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮن‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻮن اﻟﻨﺺ واﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎذاة‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎذاة ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫أو إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺳﻂ أو إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ T9ABC/T9Abc/T9abc/T9‬اب ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎت ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ أو‬ ‫ﺻﻮر و‪/‬أو ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ أو ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ إﻻ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﻣﻴﺰات اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻼم وإرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﻤﻦ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﻮز وأرﻗﺎم ورﻣﻮز ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ )ﺗﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 55
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ واﻟﺼﻮرة‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎن‬‫اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إ ﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪.T9abc/T9Abc/T9ABC/‬‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﺎت ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪"T9 off‬‬ ‫)إﻳﻘﺎف ‪ .(T9‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل وﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺮوج‪ :‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻴﺪك إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ أن اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 56
‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮاءة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد إﺣﺪى اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ<‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫إذا أﻇﻬﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪،"SIM‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺬف رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‪ .‬إذا ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮن‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺬف رﺳﺎﺋﻞ أو وﺳﺎﺋﻂ أو ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪) :‬ﻻﺧﻄﺎر رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻴﺮﻓﺮ آﻟﻴﺎ او ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اوﻻ اﺧﻄﺎر ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ إذا ﻛﺎن ﺧﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻵﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل او ﺣﺼﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ أن ّ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]اﺳﺘﻼم[‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﺧﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫اﻵﻟﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ‪.‬وﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﻄﺎر اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎرات رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫• اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻋﺮض ﻣﺤﺘﻮى اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم إ رﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إرﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪ .‬ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة‪.
PAGE 59
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘًﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮًا ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮه ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( وﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻮﻓﺮه ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮاءة ﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.6.5‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻮاﺿﻴﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ )ﺧﻴﺎرات( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ‪) Add new‬إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻮاﺿﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮاﺿﻴﻊ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ أو ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ )ﺧﻴﺎرات(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎذج‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.5‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎك اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﺪة ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ .
PAGE 61
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎذج وﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.7.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• إرﺳﺎل ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻺرﺳﺎل ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ أو‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.
PAGE 62
‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.8.5‬‬ ‫• اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺮد ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮد وﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺗﻮرة ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐّ ﻼت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت‪.
PAGE 63
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.8.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻼم اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ورود ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺒﻼد‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺠﻮال ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ M6100‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّ ﻞ ‪ّ MP3‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫وﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎً‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت وﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد أﺻﻮات ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪ .‬وﻟﻬﺬا‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس اﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮدة‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.
PAGE 65
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ذات ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮة‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ .USB‬إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫‪ ،win98 SE‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺮك أﻗﺮاص ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮة ل ‪ Windows 98‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮط‪.‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬وإذا‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪا ً آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ رؤﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.1.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎر آﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬وﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻠﻒ أو ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪات اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮق‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺸﺮ اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻟﻬﺬا‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري اﻟﺤﺼﻮل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ إذن أو ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻹﻋﺎدة إﻧﺘﺎج اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ أو ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮن اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان اﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﺨﺎص‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.6‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫ﻳُ ّ‬ ‫ﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪ ،‬واﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻮرة ﻟﺠﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ ،‬واﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وأﻏﺮاض‬ ‫أﺧﺮى ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬وﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.
PAGE 68
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• اﻟﺠﻮدة‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮازن اﻟﻀﻮء اﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺴﺐ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• زﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ زﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• أﻟﺒﻮم‪ :‬إﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫• ﺧﺮوج‪ :‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﺨﺎص ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‪.
PAGE 69
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬ ‫واﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي اﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ وإرﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎرات‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.6.6‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.7.6‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺼﻮر ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً دون إﻇﻬﺎر ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.6‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.7.
PAGE 71
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ وﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 7‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة إﻟﻰ اﻹﻋﺪادات‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.7‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1.7‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.1.
PAGE 72
‫ﻟﻮن اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.2.7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺣﺪى اﻟﺴﻤﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.2.7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻮص اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.7‬‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪى اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻮاردة إﻟﻰ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺣﺪ اﻷرﻗﺎن اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط‪.‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺣﺪ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل إﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎداً إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.3.7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ 1‬أو ﺧﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻃﺮف آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻳﻘﺎف‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎداً إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫• ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.3.7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.3.
PAGE 75
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.7‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4.7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬إذا أردت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ رﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 76
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫دوﻟﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮاردة أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‪.‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺤﺪد‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎداً إﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.4.7‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدرة‪.
PAGE 77
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.4.7‬‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻫﻲ اﺧﺘﺼﺎر ﻟﻌﺒﺎرة رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻮﺻﻮل‪ :‬رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ورﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬رﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN2‬ﻓﺄدﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ <]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬اﻟﺠﺪد ﺛﻢ أﻛﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.
PAGE 78
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺮدد‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.5.7‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎرﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ GSM 900/1800‬أو ‪.GSM 1900‬‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.7‬‬ ‫ذاﻛﺮة داﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.8.7‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.8.7‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ وﺳﻴﺤﺎول‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ أول ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ أي ﺷﺒﻜﺔ أﺧﺮى‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت |‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ واﻷﺧﺒﺎر‬ ‫وﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ اﻟﻄﻘﺲ وﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺮﺣﻼت اﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً ﻟﻠﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰودي ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬واﻷﺳﻌﺎر واﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ و‪/‬أو ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰودي اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫إرﺷﺎدات ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 80
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1.8‬‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.1.8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪة إﺷﺎرات ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪة ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻠﻢ أن ﺗﻠﻚ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ <]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت |‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.1.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﻮ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻋﺪادات‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ إﻋﺪادات ‪WAP‬‬ ‫وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان‬‫)‪ (URL‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪء‪.
PAGE 82
‫ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎك ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬ ‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ أم ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫أم ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻮص اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﺼﻮص اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ إﻋﺪادات ‪ :GPRS‬ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ إﻋﺪادات ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ GPRS‬ﻛﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :APN‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ APN‬اﻟﺨﺎص ب ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺨﺎدم ‪APN‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت |‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎدات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻬﺎدات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎدات‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺸﻬﺎدات اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎدات‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫)اﻋﺘﻤﺎداً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ أن ﻳﻘﺪم ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ وﺳﻮق‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻬﻢ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫أﻟﻌﺎب وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت أو‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ أو ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ أو ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮى ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ <]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‬ ‫أو ﺑﺪء اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬وﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫<]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺎح اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ب ﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ أى ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ ،Java‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪(O‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺨﺎص‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ |‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ JAR‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮط ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫وﺻﻔﻴﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ وﻳﻌﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ JAD‬ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻛﺎﻓﺔ أوﺻﺎف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JAD‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ أن ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪(J2ME‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ <]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ إﻟﻰ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﺪؤي ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة ‪ SMS‬أو ‪.MMS‬‬ ‫• إرﺳﺎل ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ M6100‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ |‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪(UMS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) UMS‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ (USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 128‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬وﺗُﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎح ذاﻛﺮة ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎم‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ 460) JPG‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ،‬و ‪GIF‬‬ ‫)‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ( وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت وﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.MMS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،UMS‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺎدرا ً ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺘﻼم‬ ‫أي ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أو رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺨﺰن اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫واﻟﺼﻮت أو ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎص ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ Word‬و ‪ (Excel‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻚ وﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮد اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ – ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ – ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ وﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Windows‬واﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ |‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ أﺑﺪا ً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ اﻹﻧﺠﺎز‪ .‬ﻓﺈن ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ذﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺿﺮرا ً ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻓﺼﻞ دوﻣﺎً اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻴﺎرات ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ واﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹدارة ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬وﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪.
PAGE 90
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﻼل‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﺟﺪك ﺧﺎرج اﻟﻤﻨﺰل أو‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪/‬ﻗﺮص ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺒﻚ ﺟﻮاﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎدل‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت "ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ"‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت راس ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ :‬اﺟﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪،‬‬ ‫رﻓﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬زر اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ رﺑﻂ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮاس وﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ادﺧﻞ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮاس‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 91
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت |‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت ‪ LG‬اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ داﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻼه ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫دون إﻋﻼن ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ أو اﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪M6100 :‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ‪) +55°C :‬ﺟﺎري اﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫‪) +45°C‬ﺟﺎري اﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ(‬ ‫أدﻧﻰ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬
PAGE 93
MEMO 92
PAGE 94
‫ﻓﺎرﺳ ‬ ‫‪ M 6 1 0 0‬دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧ از ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﺎت ا ﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺎ ﺳﺮو ﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه‪ ،‬در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ |‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ ‪5‬‬ ‫و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪M6100 +‬‬ ‫اﺟﺰاء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ‬ ‫دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﻓ‪6‬ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫و ﺪ ﻮ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت(‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز‪ 3‬ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ 3‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ ‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎ
PAGE 97
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ |‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸ ﺮ از ﺧﺮ ﺪ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﭘ‪6‬ﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ‪4‬ﻮﭼ‪ G‬ﻣﺪل‬ ‫ال‪ .‬ﺟ ‪4 M6100‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺗ ﻨﻮﻟﻮژ‪ 3‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ د ﺠ‪6‬ﺘﺎل‬ ‫ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎو‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻬﻤ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮه‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣ‪6‬ﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪6‬ﻨﻪ و‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ ﺎ وارد آﻣﺪن ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ ﺎ اﺻﻼﺣ ‪4‬ﻪ در ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ذ‪4‬ﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 98
‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪم رﻋﺎ ﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﻦ ﻣﻤ ﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎ‪ f‬و ﻏ‪6‬ﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ‪6‬ﺸﺘﺮ در ا ﻦ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ذ‪4‬ﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮارﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻧﺮژ‪ +‬ﻓﺮ‪.‬ﺎﻧﺲ راد&ﻮ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ در ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻣﻮاج راد&ﻮ& و‬ ‫ﻣ"ﺰان ﺟﺬب و&ﮋه )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﻣﺪل ‪ M6100‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ا‪ 3‬ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮد‪ 3‬ا ﻤﻨ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻣﻮاج راد ﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارد‪ .
PAGE 99
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ |‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ و از‬ ‫ﺑ‪6‬ﻦ رﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﺎز ﻧ ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤ‪6‬ﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ ‪ G‬ﺗ ﻨﺴ‪6‬ﻦ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ را از وﺳﺎ ﻞ اﻟ ﺘﺮوﻧ‪ 6‬از ﻗﺒ‪6‬ﻞ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺰ ﻮن‪ ،‬راد ﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ دور ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ را از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮارﺗ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ﺎ ﻟﻮازم آﺷﭙﺰ‪ 3‬دور‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ا&ﻤﻨ در ﺟﺎده‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﻦ و ﻣﻘﺮرات اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ را در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻬﺎ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ در آن راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ رﻋﺎ ﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﺳﺘ در ﺣ‪6‬ﻦ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧ ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎم دﻗﺖ ﺧﻮد را در ﻃﻮل راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎر ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﺻﻮرت اﻣ ﺎن از ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ‪ 3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﺻﻮرﺗ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺷﺮا ﻂ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ا ﺠﺎب ‪4‬ﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺮدن ﺎ ﺟﻮاب دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺗﻮﻣﺒ‪6‬ﻞ ﺧﻮد را در ‪4‬ﻨﺎر ﺟﺎده‬ ‫ﭘﺎر‪4 f‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ |‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ در اﺗﺎﻗ‪ G‬ﺧﻮدرو ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه و ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ آن ﻗﺮار دارد‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎزﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻌﺎت ﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮه ﺣﻤﻞ ﺎ‬ ‫اﻧﺒﺎر ﻧ ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻫﻮاﭘ"ﻤﺎ‬ ‫وﺳﺎ ﻞ ﺑ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ در ﻫﻮاﭘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺧﺘﻼل ﻣ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاﭘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻫﻮاﭘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ رو‪ 3‬زﻣ‪6‬ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ‪4‬ﺴﺐ اﺟﺎزه از‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎدر ﭘﺮواز از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧ ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﻮد‪.
PAGE 102
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ& ﺟﻬﺖ ا&ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ"ﻨﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰ ﺪه ﻧ‪6‬ﺴﺖ آن را ﻋﻮض‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد آن را ﻗﺒﻞ از‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺎرژ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬را در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﻘ‪6‬ﻢ ﻧﻮر ﺧﻮرﺷ‪6‬ﺪ و ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤ‪6‬ﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻤﺎم ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬را در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺳﺮد و ﺎ ﮔﺮم ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣﻤ ﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ رو‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬ﺗﺎﺛ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻔ ﺑﮕﺬارد‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪| +‬‬ ‫و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪M6100 +‬‬ ‫اﺟﺰاء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪f1‬‬ ‫‪. .f‬ﻠ"ﺪﻫﺎى ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎ&"ﻦ‬ ‫• ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎز‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪4‬ﻨﺘﺮل ﻣ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﻃﻰ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان ﺻﺪاى ﮔﻮﺷﻰ را ‪4‬ﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻰ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .i‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ .k‬ﻓ"ﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻫﺪﺳﺖ را ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ وﺻﻞ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .m‬ﻠ"ﺪ دورﺑ"ﻦ‪MP3/‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﺸﻮ را ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ آﺷ ﺎر ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪ .f‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑ"ﻦ‬ ‫آ ﻟﻮدﮔﻰ روى ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ‪64‬ﻔ‪6‬ﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺗﺄﺛ‪6‬ﺮ ﮔﺬارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪f1 i2‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪k3‬‬ ‫‪m4‬‬ ‫‪v8‬‬ ‫‪x9‬‬ ‫‪u7‬‬ ‫‪t6‬‬ ‫‪ .i‬ﻓﻼش‬ ‫‪ .k‬ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎى ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ .m‬ﮔ"ﺮه ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪ .r‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫‪ .t‬ﺳﻮ‪.‬ﺖ ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت‬ ‫‪ .u‬ﭘﺎ&ﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت‬ ‫‪ .v‬ﭘﺎ&ﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫‪ .x‬راﺑﻂ ﺷﺎرژر‪ /‬راﺑﻂ ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪| +‬‬ ‫و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪M6100 +‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﺑﺎز‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪1f‬‬ ‫‪6t‬‬ ‫‪7u‬‬ ‫‪8v‬‬ ‫‪9x‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫{‪f‬‬ ‫‪i2‬‬ ‫‪k3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪ff‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪fi‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪m4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬از ﺑﺮوز ﻣﺸ ﻼﺗ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻨ‪6‬ﺪه ﻧﺸﺪن‬ ‫ﺻﺪا ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻃﺮف ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬در ﺣ‪6‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪4‬ﺸﻮ را‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .f‬ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪. .i‬ﻠ"ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد‪ 3‬را اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ 3‬آن در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .k‬ﻠ"ﺪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎى ورودى ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪ .
PAGE 106
‫‪ .t‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫وب‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ و ﻣﻮارد د ﮕﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺗﻤﺎم رﻧﮕﻰ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣﻰ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .u‬ﻠ"ﺪﻫﺎى ﭘ"ﻤﺎ&ﺸ ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮ‪4‬ﺖ در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﺣﺮ‪4‬ﺖ دادن ﻣ ﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻰ ﮔ‪6‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .v‬ﻠ"ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد‪ 3‬را اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ 3‬آن در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .x‬ﻠ"ﺪ ﺗﺎ&"ﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻋﻤﻠ‪6‬ﺎت را ﺗﺄ ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻰ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪+‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 107
‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪| +‬‬ ‫و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪M6100 +‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫در ﺟﺪول ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺎ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى ﻧﻤﺎ ﺸﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻰ ﺗﻮﺿ‪6‬ﺢ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ‪4‬ﻪ روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮى روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮى ﺗﻮﺿ"ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﺳ‪6‬ﮕﻨﺎل ﺷﺒ ﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪❈.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ در ﺟﺮ ﺎن‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺣﺎل‬ ‫ﻓﺮاﻣ ﺎﻧﻰ در ﺷﺒ ﻪ د ﮕﺮى ﻫﺴﺘ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫و روﺷﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫اﻋﻼم ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎ ﺪ از ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ ،‬وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M6100‬و&ﮋﮔ"ﻬﺎ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮى ﺗﻮﺿ"ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺣﺎل‬ ‫دﺳﺘ‪6‬ﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ WAP‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ درﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫از ‪ GPRS‬ﻫﺴﺘ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ رو ﺪاد ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓﻌﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻌﺎل‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر |‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى اﻃﻤ‪6‬ﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .f‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ +‬را ﺑ"ﺮون ﺑ"ﺎور&ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫د‪4‬ﻤﻪ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬رﻫﺎﺳﺎز‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ا ﻨ ﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺣﺎل‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬را از‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ آن ﺑ‪6‬ﺮون ﺑ‪6‬ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .i‬ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت را ﻧﺼﺐ ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت را در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص آن ﺟﺎى دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎرت را ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص آن ﺣﺮ‪4‬ﺖ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺷﺎرژ ‪.‬ﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺗﺼﺎل آداﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬را ﻧﺼﺐ ‪4‬ﺮده‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر‬ ‫‪ .k‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ +‬را ﻧﺼﺐ ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .f‬اﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬د ﮕﺮ آداﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺰ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺰﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺷﺎرژر‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ 3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻣ‪6‬ﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮ‪ f‬ﻧﻤﺎد ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﭘﺲ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ا ﻨ ﻪ ﺷﺎرژ ‪4‬ﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮار ﻣﺘﺤﺮ‪ f‬ﻧﻤﺎد ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر |‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ﺑﺮق و ﺷﺎرژر را ﺟﺪا ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ و آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز‪ 3‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮاﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ اﺷ‪6‬ﺎء ﻧﻮ‪ f‬ﺗ‪6‬ﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﻧﺪان ﺣ‪6‬ﻮاﻧﺎت‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘ‪6‬ﺪا ﻧ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ز ﺮا ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز‪ 3‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ ﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺟﻮاب‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ز ﺮا ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ا ﺠﺎد ﻣﺪار ‪4‬ﻮﺗﺎه در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه و ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ ﺎ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز‪ 3‬را ﺑﺪﻧﺒﺎل داﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪا‪.
PAGE 112
‫روﺷﻦ ‪.‬ﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮده و آن را ﺑﻪ آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺑﺮﻗ و‬ ‫ ﺎ آداﭘﺘﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺒ‪6‬ﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ و ﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪E‬را ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬روﺷﻦ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ‪4‬ﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ‪4‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ‪.‬ﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪E‬را ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر |‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﺎر‬ ‫‪.‬ﺪ ‪ m) PINi‬ﺗﺎ ‪ v‬رﻗﻤ (‬ ‫‪.‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ"ﺘ ) ‪ m‬ﺗﺎ ‪ v‬رﻗﻤ (‬ ‫وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ‪4‬ﺪ ‪4 PIN2‬ﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﮕﺮدد ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬دﺳﺘ‪6‬ﺎﺑ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧ از ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓ‪ 6‬ﺲ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮس ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ‪6‬ﮕﺮدﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ‪6‬ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﻓﺮاد د ﮕﺮ را از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨﺪ‪4 .
PAGE 114
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ‪4‬ﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ا‪ ،3‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را وارد‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ )‪4 (C‬ﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﭘﺎ‪ f‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ارﺳﺎل )‪ (S‬را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ )اﺗﺼﺎل( ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫¬‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس د‪4‬ﻤﻪ )‪ (E‬ﺎ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫راﺳﺖ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ در ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس از دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ و ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺎ آن‬ ‫ﺳﺮ و ‪4‬ﺎر دار ﺪ و ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣ ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ در ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت و‪ /‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮد ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎم دﻟﺨﻮاه در‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ )‪ (S‬ﺑﺎ آن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﻧﮓ ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫داﺷﺘﻦ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﺪار ﭼﭗ‪L‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ رﻓﺘﺎر را ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج )آﻧﺘﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج ﺳ‪6‬ﮕﻨﺎل آﻧﺘﻦ را ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ آﻧﺘﻦ‬ ‫) ( روس ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ‪4 LCD‬ﻨﺘﺮل ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج‬ ‫آﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص در داﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻐ‪6‬ﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮ‪4‬ﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺳ‪6‬ﮕﻨﺎل‬ ‫آﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﮔﻮﺷ اﻟﻔﺒﺎ و اﻋﺪاد را وارد‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣ‪6‬ﺒﺎ ﺴﺖ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮوف ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣ‪ G‬ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﺮوف ‪4‬ﻠﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺒﺎر‪،‬‬ ‫دو ﺑﺎر‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺎ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺑﺎر ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ ‪4‬ﻪ ‪4‬ﻠﻤﻪ ‪4‬ﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) fik‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺪد‪(+‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺗﺎ ﭗ ‪4‬ﺮدن اﻋﺪاد ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻋﺪد‪ 3‬رو‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دادن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪#‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 123‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ""ﺮ دادن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وارد ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫‪ .١‬زﻣﺎﻧ‪ 6‬ﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﻗﺮار دار ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ وﺳ‪6‬ﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪23‬ﺗﺎ‪9‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ﻟﻐﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪3‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮف ‪ G‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺣﺮوف ﻟﻐﺎت ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﺟﺎزه دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ‪4‬ﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﺷﻮد و ﻗﺒﻞ از آن ﺑﻪ آﻧﭽﻪ رو‪3‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد ﺗﻮﺟﻬ ﻧ ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘ ﭘﺲ از ‪4‬ﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪن‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺖ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎر د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺋ‪6‬ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬د ﮕﺮ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻟﻐﺖ رﺟﻮع ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫از د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 23‬ﺗﺎ ‪9‬ﺟﻬﺖ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮد‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎن رو‪ 3‬آﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺒﺎر ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺣﺮف اول‬ ‫• دو ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺣﺮف دوم‬ ‫• و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤ‪6‬ﻦ ﺗﺮﺗ‪6‬ﺐ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻗﺮار دادن ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪ ،‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪0‬را ﺒﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺣﺬف ﺣﺮوف د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪C‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪C‬را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮده و ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪4‬ﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎ‪ f‬ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ 123‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ 123‬ﺷﻤﺎ را ﻗﺎدر ﻣ‪6‬ﺴﺎزد در‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ﺧﻮد ﻋﺪد وارد ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ )ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻣﺜﺎل ‪ G‬ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ اﻋﺪاد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ا ﻨ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬ ‫دﺳﺘ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮد ﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ )‪ (#‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺮوف ﺑﻪ اﻋﺪاد ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﺠﺎد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺛﺎﻧﻮ ﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را از‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ا ﻦ و ﮋﮔ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣ‪3‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻄﺮح اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات آن را ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ ﻣ‪6‬ﺴﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺟﺰﺋ‪6‬ﺎت ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ و ﻏ‪6‬ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ا ﻦ و ﮋﮔ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ [¬.٣.٧‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس اول را در‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻠ‪6‬ﻖ ﻗﺮار داده و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس دوم ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎر از ﻓﺸﺮدن د‪4‬ﻤﻪ‪ S‬ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫د‪4‬ﻤﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس دوم‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎس دوﻣ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس دوم را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و اﮔﺮ‪S‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ‪،‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس دوم ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ‪6‬ﮕﺮدد‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎس اول ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮد‪4‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻗﺮار ﻣ‪6‬ﮕ‪6‬ﺮد‪ .‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫وﺳ‪6‬ﻠﻪ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ و ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺑ‪6‬ﻦ دو ﺗﻤﺎس رﻓﺖ و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﻔﺮاد‪ +‬در ﺣ"ﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ&ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ‪.‬ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﺠﺎد ‪ G‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺼﻮﺻ از ﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪4‬ﺮده‬ ‫و ﺳﭙﺲ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار دادن‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن د ﮕﺮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣ‪3‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪه ‪4‬ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‪4‬ﻪ ا‪4‬ﻨﻮن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‪E‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ .f‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫¬ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ È‬ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬در ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه‬ ‫¬ ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬اﺧ‪6‬ﺮ‬ ‫‪ È‬ﻫﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ ª‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ .k‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ زﻧﮓ دار‬ ‫‪Bluetooth ٢‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﺎﺷ‪6‬ﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب‬ ‫¬ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ È‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ ‬ ‫‪ ª‬ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﻣﻮدم‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ |‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪ .t‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫‪MP3 ١‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬دورﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﻓ‪6‬ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‪3‬‬ ‫¬ ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ È‬و ﺪ ﻮ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ª‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 126
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ را ﺑﺰﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﺑﺰﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ و ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 3‬آن‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺎﺑ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺎﺑ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠ‪3‬ﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اى از ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ را در اﺧﺘ‪6‬ﺎر ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻰ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻰ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ‬ ‫در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒ‪6‬ﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و از ﻃﺮ ﻖ دو‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎى ]>[ و ]<[ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ |‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫در ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬رو ﺪادﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤ‪6‬ﻄﻬﺎ ﺎ ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪه ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ از ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا‪ +‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ و ﮔﻮﺷ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮان اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻ ‪4‬ﺮد‪4 .‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ‪6‬ﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.×.f‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 128
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻧﺎم ‪ G‬ﭘﺮوﻓﺎ ﻞ را ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ داده و ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎم دﻟﺨﻮاﻫ را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬آن ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧ‪3‬ﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ را ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ و ﺑﻪ آن ﻧﺎم دﻟﺨﻮاه‬ ‫را ﺑﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا و ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮان ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ‬ ‫داد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﺻﺪا‪. +‬ﻠ"ﺪﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫را ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آﻫﻨﮓ اﺳﻼ&ﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤ‪6‬ﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ زﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﺮدن راﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس |‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ‪6‬ﺮﻧﺪه‬ ‫)‪ (CLI‬را در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮان ﺳﻮاﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﺑ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬در ﺎﻓﺘ را ﺑﺮرﺳ ‪4‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎم )در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﺎر ﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨ‪6‬ﻦ زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.i‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎﺳﺦ داده‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﺧ‪6‬ﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ +‬اﺧ"ﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.i‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﺣﺬف ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺑ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و در ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫را ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﺠﺎ ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﺪت ﻣ‪3‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.i‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.r.i‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ورود‪ 3‬و ﺧﺮوﺟ ‬ ‫را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس را ﻣﺠﺪدا ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس |‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت اﺳﺖ(‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.i.k‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮع ﭘﻮل و واﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻟ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن ﻧﺮخ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺧﻮ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘﻮل ﺎ واﺣﺪ در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺪ ‪ ٢‬ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز دار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‪ 3‬رﻗﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ‪4‬ﺎر‪4‬ﺮد ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﮔﺮدد‪ .
PAGE 132
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ زﻧﮕﺪار‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪ È‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ زﻧﮓ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬زﻧﮓ زدن در ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬روﺷﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﺮده و زﻣﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬زﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار را وارد ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬دوره ﺗ ﺮار آﻧﺮا اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ G :‬ﺑﺎر‪ ،‬دوﺷﻨﺒﻪ~ﺟﻤﻌﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫دوﺷﻨﺒﻪ~ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ روز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻟﺨﻮاه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﺮده و<‪] .‬ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ[ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫¬‪ .‬ﻧﺎم ﻫﺸﺪار را و ﺮا ﺶ ‪4‬ﺮده‪]<.‬ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.
PAGE 133
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.i.k‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪ +‬ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.i.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.i.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ 3‬را ﺛﺒﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻼ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪4‬ﺮده ا ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘﺲ از ورود رﻣﺰ ورود آن را ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺗﺒﺪ&ﻞ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.k‬‬ ‫در ا ﻨﺠﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻫﺮ واﺣﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬را ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺗﺎن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ<]واﺣﺪ[ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ از ا ﻦ ﭼﻬﺎر‬ ‫واﺣﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ارزش ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬واﺣﺪ‪4 3‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‪U‬و‪D‬ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ﺷﺪه واﺣﺪ دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺗﺎن را ﺑﺮرﺳ ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﺪه ﺟﻬﺎن را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺒ‪6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫ﺟﻠﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.t.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.t.k‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪.‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ‪f‬و ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r/m.t.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ را ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻛﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ز&ﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ را ‪4‬ﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﺮد ﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧ"ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧ"ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ازده ﺛﺎﻧ"ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ده ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮدم‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪u.i.k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪u.k‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﻣﻮدم ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺷﺒ ﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.m‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧ‪3‬ﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ |‬ ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎر‪4 ،‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ>]اﺳﺎﻣ [ را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬دﺳﺘ‪6‬ﺎﺑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ‪6‬ﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪.‬ﺮدن از دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.f.m‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ <]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[‬ ‫ ﺎ ]ﺗﺄ ‪6‬ﺪ[ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧ‪3‬ﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن ﺣﺮوف اول ﻧﺎم ﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮ ﻊ ﻣ‪6‬ﺴﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎر ﺑﺮدن ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎ ﺶ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎره را دارد‪ .‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ‪4‬ﺎرا‪4‬ﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ﺗﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫<]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ ﺎ ]ﺗﺄ ‪6‬ﺪ[ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ |‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻋﻀﻮ را از ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ اﻋﻀﺎ‪ 3‬ﮔﺮوه‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬وﻟ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و‪ 3‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻗ ﻣ‪6‬ﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐ""ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ‪ G‬ﮔﺮوه را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ"ﺮ‪ +‬ﺳﺮ&ﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.f.m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳ را ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ‪ G‬از ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺎ‪2 3‬ﺗﺎ‪ 9‬اﺧﺘﺼﺎص‬ ‫دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از آن ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻋﺪد‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ آن ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن د‪4‬ﻤﻪ>]اﺳﺎﻣ [ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 140
‫‪.‬ﭙ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪t.f.m‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪4‬ﭙ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻋ ﺲ ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧ‪6‬ﺰ اﻣ ﺎ ن ﭘﺬ ﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن>]اﺳﺎﻣ [ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ‪.‬ﻠ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ‬ ‫• ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺶ‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ د‪4‬ﻤﻪ<]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻃﻮر‪ 3‬ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎم را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺑﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ |‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ>]اﺳﺎﻣ [ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و رو‪ 3‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻠ ‬ ‫د‪4‬ﻤﻪ<]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ا‪ 3‬را ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘﺎ‪4 f‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‪ ،‬و ﺑﻌﺪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )<( ]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 .٣‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ را وارد ‪4‬ﺮده و <]ﻗﺒﻮل ‪4‬ﺮدن[ ﺎ>‬ ‫]ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫• ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪v.f.m‬‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ ﺳﺮو ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ‪4‬ﻪ وارد ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪ G ،‬ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺎه و ﺳﺎل در ﺑﺎﻻ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎه ﺗﺎر ﺦ را در ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ ﺑﺪﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮد‪4‬ﺎر ﺑﻪ روز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﻓﻌﻠ ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه و ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺎ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ G‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫رﻧﮓ در ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﺘﻤﺎ ﺰ ﻣ ‬ ‫ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮان ‪ G‬ﻫﺸﺪار ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ و ﺎدآورﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺻﻮرﺗ‪ 6‬ﻪ ‪ G‬ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺮده ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬زﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ‪.‬ﻠ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.i.m‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘﺎ‪4 f‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮو ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر&ﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر&ﺰ |‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ‪6‬ﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺗﺎن ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.i.m‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪t.i.m‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫&ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.m‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ<]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ ﺎدداﺷﺖ را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬در ﺻﻮرت ﺧﺎﻟ ﺑﻮدن‪ ،‬ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ<]اﻓﺰودن[ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 144
‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ )<( را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺎى‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﺎم ﺟﺪ&ﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ"ﺎم ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.r‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.f.r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎى اﻋﻼم ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ و ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎى ﺳﺮو ﺲ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ‪4‬ﻮﺗﺎه )‪ (SMS‬را در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ و ‪ SMS‬ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻫﺎى ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاى‬ ‫‪4‬ﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ‪6‬ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى" " ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ‪ G‬ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻰ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﺮده ا ﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ارﺳﺎل )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ از ورود ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد(‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ذﺧ"ﺮه در ﭘ"ﺶ ﻧﻮ&ﺴﻬﺎ‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﻣﻰ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم را ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪا ً ﺑﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آن را ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻧﺪازه و ﺳﺒ‪ G‬ﻗﻠﻢ را ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ )ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ( و ﭘﺲ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ را‬ ‫ﻧ‪6‬ﺰ ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ"ﺎم ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.f.r‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا‪ 3‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‪ ،‬و ﺎ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻣ ﺗﻮان از ا ﻦ و ﮋﮔ ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﺮد ‪4‬ﻪ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ ‫ﺷﺒ ﻪ آن را ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ و ﮋﮔ‪6‬ﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ا ﻤ‪6‬ﻞ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر را اراﺋﻪ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ را ارﺳﺎل ﺎ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ را ﺑﺎ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺎ وارد ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ اﺳﻼ&ﺪ‪ :‬اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ 3‬ﺎ ﻗﺒﻠ را ﺣﺮ‪4‬ﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﺳﻼ&ﺪ‪ :‬اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﺣﺬف ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ اﺳﻼ&ﺪ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﺗﺎ&ﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ و ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ را‬‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﻮ&ﺾ ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ و ﻣﺘﻮن ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬‫در اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐﺎت ‪ :Tx‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻟﻐﺎت ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن را‬ ‫ﺑﻪ آن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫‪.‬ﻠ"ﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ‪4‬ﻮﺗﺎه‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻓﻮر‪3‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻓﻮر‪3‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ 3‬اﻃﻼع داده ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﭘ"ﺎم ﺳ"ﻢ‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ﺑﺪ ﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﺳﺖ ‪4‬ﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﺎص رو‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﮔﺮد ﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ا ﻦ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﺻﻨﺪوق ورود‪ ،3‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﻣﺘﻤﺎ ﺰ ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 149
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬در ﺎﻓﺘ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺟﺎر‪ 3‬را ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل ﻣﺠﺪد‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد د ﮕﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫در ا ﻨﺠﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ارﺳﺎﻟ و ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺸﺪه را ﺑﺒ‪6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺗﺤﻮ ﻞ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ارﺳﺎﻟ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮور ‪4‬ﺮدن ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺻﻨﺪوق ورود‪ 3‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﻠ"ﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ارﺳﺎل ﺷﺪه‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮ ﻞ ‪ MMS‬ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ارﺳﺎل ﺷﺪه‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮ ﻞ ‪ SMS‬ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.r‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ ‪.‬ﻪ ﭘ"ﺎم را ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ا&ﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ارﺳﺎﻟ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫• اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ درﺑﺎره ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺧﺮوﺟ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ را ‪4‬ﻪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ارﺳﺎل ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ را ‪4‬ﻪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﺶ ﻧﻮ&ﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.r‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ را‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ ﺑ‪6‬ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺮ و ‪4‬ﺎر دار ﺪ‪ ،‬از ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻫﺎى ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻫﺎى ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮﻫﺎى ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ از ﻗﺒ‪6‬ﻞ ﮔﺰارش آب و ﻫﻮا‪ ،‬اﺧﺒﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺮاﻓ‪ ،G6‬ﻗ‪6‬ﻤﺖ ﺗﺎ‪4‬ﺴﻰ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬داروﻫﺎ‪ ،‬و ﺳﻬﺎم ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ ‪ G‬از ا ﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎ ‪ G‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﻤﺮاه اﺳﺖ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮان آن‬ ‫را از اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒ ﻪ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﺮد‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ +‬ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.u.r‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• د ﺮ ‪4‬ﺮدم‪ .‬ﻣﻦ آﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﻮاﻫﻢ ﺑﻮد ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻻ ‪4‬ﺠﺎﺋ ؟‬ ‫• در راﻫﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧ‪6‬ﻠﻰ ﺿﺮور‪.3‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• دوﺳﺘﺖ دارم‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ز&ﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺶ‪ :‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‪ :‬اﻟﮕﻮ را ﺣﺬف ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ&ﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ا ﺠﺎد اﻟﮕﻮ‪ 3‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ&ﻖ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ارﺳﺎل ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.v.r‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻓﺎ‪.‬ﺲ‪ ،‬اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧ ﻣﻠ ‪ .X،400 ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫اﻟ‪3‬ﺘﺮوﻧ"‪ERMES ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻣ‪6‬ﮕﺮدد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺘﻀ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﺘﻦ را ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع د ﮕﺮ آن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﻣ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﻨ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪت در ﻣﺮ‪4‬ﺰ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰارش ﺗﺤﻮ&ﻞ‪ :‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻠ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺒ‪6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﺘﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘ‪6‬ﺖ ارﺳﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت ﺷﺒ‪3‬ﻪ‪ :‬ﺳﺮور ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم را ﺑ ﺎر ﺑﺮ ﺪ‪ URL ،‬را از ﺳﺮور‬ ‫ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ‪ :‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠ"ﻐﺎت‪ :‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎزرﮔﺎﻧ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺿﺮور‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﺴﺘ ﺻﻮﺗ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.u.r‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ا ﻦ ﺳ‪6‬ﺴﺘﻢ را ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ﺷﺪه را در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘ‪ 6‬ﻪ ‪ G‬ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣ‪6‬ﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ رو‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.u.r‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻃﻮر‪ 3‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم را در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ و ﺎ ﺧ‪6‬ﺮ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.t‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ |‬ ‫‪ M6100‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪ G‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪه داﺧﻠ ‪ MP3‬ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪ G‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺎ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ 3‬داﺧﻠ از ﺷﻨ‪6‬ﺪن ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺳ‪6‬ﻘ ‪ MP3‬در‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧ‪3‬ﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ دﻟ‪6‬ﻞ اﺑﻌﺎد ‪4‬ﻮﭼ‪ G‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎ ﺪ ﺻﺪا در ﺑﻌﻀ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮارد دﭼﺎر اﺧﻼل ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮص در ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﺣﺪا‪4‬ﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺑﻢ ﻓﺮاواﻧ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﻣ رﺳﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 158
‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ د ﮕﺮ‪4 3‬ﭙ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ‪ MP3 3‬را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼ ﺑﺎ ﺪ دارا‪ 3‬ﺳ‪6‬ﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪Windows 2000 ،Windows ME ،Windows 98‬‬ ‫‪ Windows XP‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪.‬ﻨﻨﺪه ‪MPk‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.r.t‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻨﻮ‪ MP3 3‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪه ‪ MP3،١‬را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 .٢‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ <]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬دﺳﺘ‪6‬ﺎﺑ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ز ﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ |‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ را‬‫ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌ""ﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ‪.‬ﺮدن اﺗﻔﺎﻗ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ‪3‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺳ‪6‬ﻘ ‪ MP3‬را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗ‪6‬ﺐ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓ ﮔﻮش ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺟﻠﻮه ﺑﺼﺮ‪ :+‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺟﻠﻮه ﺑﺼﺮ‪ 3‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ :‬ﺳﺒ‪ ،G‬ﺟﻬﺶ و ﮔ‪6‬ﺘﺎر ﺴﺖ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﺟﺎزه ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺲ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ ‪4‬ﺮ ﺴﺘﺎل ﻣﺎ ﻊ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬اﺻﻠ و ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺮﻋ را در ﺣ‪6‬ﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.r.
PAGE 160
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻬ‪6‬ﻪ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻋ ﺴ در اﻧﺪازه دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺧﻮد ﺗﻬ‪6‬ﻪ ﻧﻤﻮده‪ ،‬و از آن‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻋ ﺲ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ و ﺎ ﻣﺼﺎرف و ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻋ ﺲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ را ﮔﺮﻓﺘ‪6‬ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آﻧﺮا در ‪ G‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ ا ﻤ‪6‬ﻞ ارﺳﺎل ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎزﺷﺪﻧ ز ﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• روﺷﻨﺎ& ‪ :‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان روﺷﻨﺎ را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ |‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ ‪4 G‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ از ﺿﺒﻂ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ‬ ‫ا ﻤ‪6‬ﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ارﺳﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎزﺷﺪﻧ ز ﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• روﺷﻨﺎ& ‪ :‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺰان روﺷﻨﺎ را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻧﺪازه‪ :‬اﻧﺪازه ﻋ ﺲ را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎ&ﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺧ‪6‬ﺮ زﻣﺎﻧ را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪".‬ﻔ"ﺖ‪64 :‬ﻔ‪6‬ﺖ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ را ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫و&ﺪ&ﻮ‪ +‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.t‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4 G‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪4‬ﺮده و ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ&ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4 G‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ را ﭘﺨﺶ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ&ﻖ ‪ : Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ را از‬ ‫ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ارﺳﺎل ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪t.t‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺖ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﺣﺪا‪4‬ﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﭘ‪6‬ﺎم‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ را ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺪا‪4‬ﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧ‪6‬ﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ا ﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪4 ،‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫<]ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﻮان ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ را وارد ‪4‬ﺮده‪4 ،‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫<]ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ |‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.t.t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺻﻮﺗ را ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺻﻮﺗ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ ‪4‬ﺮده ﺎ ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫دورﺑ"ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪u.t‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.u.t‬‬ ‫• ذﺧ"ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ +‬ﺧﻮد‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﺎر&ﺦ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.u‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ‪6‬ﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ ووﻗﺖ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎر&ﺦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.i.u‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮ&ﺮ زﻣ"ﻨﻪ‪ :‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ﭘﺲ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ را‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.f.u‬‬ ‫ﭘ"ﺶ ﻓﺮض‬ ‫ ‪ G‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ اﻧ‪6‬ﻤ‪6‬ﺸﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﺲ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‪ R‬ﺎ‪ L‬ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.f.u‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫ ‪ G‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ اﻧ‪6‬ﻤ‪6‬ﺸﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﺲ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫• زﻣﺎن ﻧﻮر زﻣ"ﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺪت روﺷﻨ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ‪3‬ﻪ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ رو‪ 3‬روﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ ﻪ )ﻧﺎم‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه( رو‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ ‪4‬ﺮ ﺴﺘﺎل ﻣﺎ ﻊ ‪ LCD‬داﺧﻠ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.i.u‬‬ ‫اﺟﺎزه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﻣ‪6‬ﺎن ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪ 3‬از ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﺷﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.i.u‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ زﺑﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭘ‪6‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ را در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫• ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ +‬داده‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪ G‬ارﺗﺒﺎط ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ‪ 3‬ﺑﻪ ‪ G‬ﺷﻤﺎره اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ +‬ﻓﺎ‪.‬ﺲ‬ ‫ ‪ G‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺎ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻓ ﺲ را ﺑﺪون ﻗ‪6‬ﺪ وﺷﺮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ز&ﺮﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ در ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﺳﺎزد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره د&ﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل وارد ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪ È‬ﺷﻤﺎره اﺧ‪6‬ﺮ را ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏ"ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫وﺿﻌ"ﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫• ‪.‬ﺸﻮ& ﺑﺎز‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.k.u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس وارده را ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎز‬ ‫‪4‬ﺮدن درب ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮ ‪.‬ﻠ"ﺪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻫﺮ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ‪4 3‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‪]E‬ﭘﺎ ﺎن[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺟﻮاب دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ‪.‬ﻠ"ﺪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪]S‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن[ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺟﻮاب دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 168
‫• ﻧﻤﺎ&ﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ‪6‬ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮق دﻗ"ﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.k.u‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮروﺷﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﺮد ﺪ ﺣ‪6‬ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪت ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ را‬ ‫در ﺟﺮ ﺎن ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دﻗ‪6‬ﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗ‪3‬ﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪t.k.u‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏ"ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﺮدد ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬ﻣﺠﺪدا ً‬ ‫آﻏﺎز ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.m.
PAGE 169
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.m.u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻏ‪6‬ﺮﻣﺠﺎز ‪4‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺑ ﺎر ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ وﻗﺘ‪ 6‬ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را روﺷﻦ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪4‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ را ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ را ﺧﻮد ﺑﺨﻮد ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎز ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎن ‪4‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ را‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣ‪6‬ﻦ ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ ﺳ‪6‬ﻢ ‪4‬ﺎرت ﺗﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎ&ﺎن ﻣﻬﻠﺖ زﻣﺎﻧ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.‬ﻠ"ﺪ ﺧﻮد‪.‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.m.u‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﺗﻌ‪66‬ﻦ زﻣﺎن ﻗﻔﻞ ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺧﻮد‪4‬ﺎر را ﻣ ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪود&ﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.
PAGE 170
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳ"ﻢ ‪.‬ﺎرت(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.m.u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ ارﺳﺎﻟ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘ‪6‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ارﺳﺎﻟ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻌ‪6‬ﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﮔ‪6‬ﺮ‪ 3‬ﺷﺪه را ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺒ‪6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ""ﺮ ‪.‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪t.m.
PAGE 171
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت ﺷﺒ‪3‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪r.u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ‪ G‬ﺷﺒ ﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮد‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻮد ﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ً اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗ" اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣ‪6‬ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺒ‪3‬ﻪ‬ ‫• دﺳﺘ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.r.u‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗ‪ G6‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣ‪ 6‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ G ،‬ﺷﺒ ﻪ‬ ‫را ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ و ﺑﺮا ﺘﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫• دﺳﺘ ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﺎﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد ‪.‬ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪u.u‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت ‪4‬ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺪ‬ ‫اﻣﻨ‪6‬ﺘ ﻧ‪6‬ﺎزدار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ داﺧﻠ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.v.u‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺖ وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ&ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.v.u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫وﺿﻌ"ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪v.u‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺖ وﺿﻌ‪6‬ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ 3‬ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ |‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت و ﺳﺮو ﺴﻬﺎ‪) WAP 3‬ﭘﺮوﺗ ﻞ‬ ‫‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺑ‪6‬ﺴ‪6‬ﻢ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻧ ﺪار‪ ،3‬اﺧﺒﺎر‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰارﺷﺎت ﻫﻮاﺷﻨﺎﺳ و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﭘﺮوازﻫﺎ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻫﺎ و ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﺎص ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اراﺋﻪ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪WAP‬‬ ‫در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻗﺮار داده ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻮدن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪،WAP‬ﻗ‪6‬ﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ ‫ﺷﺒ ﻪ و‪ /‬ﺎ اراﺋﻪ ‪4‬ﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺴ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ‪6‬ﺪ از آن‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﭼ‪4 G‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.v‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.f.v‬‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺎ ﺘ را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر‬ ‫درﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬اﻣ ﺎﻧﺎت آن را‬ ‫ﺑ‪6‬ﺎﺑ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.f.v‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ آدرس ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ وب‬ ‫دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬دﺳﺘﺮﺳ آﺳﺎن در دﻓﻌﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ دارا‪ 3‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺎب از ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬از ﭘ‪6‬ﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه را ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮان‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﺮد‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫• و&ﺮا&ﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ آدرﺳﻬﺎ‪ URL 3‬و ﺎ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫را و ﺮا ﺶ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﺣﺬف ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﺣﺬف ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ |‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.f.v‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ‪6‬ﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎ ﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از وارد ‪4‬ﺮدن آدرس ‪ URL‬ﺧﺎص‪4 ،‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺄ ‪6‬ﺪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.f.v‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺷﺒ ﻪ اﺳﺖ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪GPRS 2‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻤﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ وﻗﺘ ﭘﺪ ﺪ ﻣ آ ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ"ﺮ‪4 :+‬ﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮور ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮرد ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز‬ ‫ﻣ‪6‬ﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ‪.‬ﺎرﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ‪4‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮور دا ﻞ اپ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ورود‪ ،WAP 3‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ را ﻣﻌﺮﻓ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮر‪ :‬ﻧﻮع ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺎ د ﺠ‪6‬ﺘﺎل‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫• ﺗﻐ""ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺺ را ﺗﻐ‪66‬ﺮ دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ‪.‬ﻨ"ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را از ﻟ‪6‬ﺴﺖ ﺣﺬف ﻣ ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻓﺰود ن ﺟﺪ&ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ 3‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ |‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻓﻌﺎت ‪4‬ﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﺗﺼﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺎ‬ ‫وﺳ‪6‬ﻠﻪ د ﮕﺮ را ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﻮ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ‪4‬ﻪ آ ﺎ ‪4‬ﻮ‪ 4‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﺎ ﺧ‪6‬ﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎ| ‪.‬ﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﭘﺎ‪ f‬ﻣ ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎ| ‪.
PAGE 178
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز‪ +‬ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪f.f.x‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺟﺎوا‪ 3‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺪ ﺮ ﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺷﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ ﺎ ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل را‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪4 .‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ<]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﺑﺎز ‪4‬ﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﺠﺪد ﻣ‪6‬ﺪﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ<]ﻣﻨﻮ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ز ﺮ در دﺳﺘﺮس اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 179
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ |‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا ‪ G‬ﺗ ﻨﻮﻟﻮژ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪Sun‬‬ ‫‪ Microsystems‬اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در ا ﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ روﺷ ‪4‬ﻪ اﭘﻠﺖ ﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺮورﮔﺮﻫﺎ ‪ 3‬اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ Netscape‬ﺎ ‪MS‬‬ ‫‪ Internet Explorer‬داﻧﻠﻮد ﻣ ‪4‬ﺮد ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮان ‪ MIDlet‬ﻫﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ‪4 3‬ﻪ ‪ WAP‬آﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬ ‫داﻧﻠﻮد ﻧﻤﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﺎس ﺟﺎوا ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﺎﻓﺘ و اﺟﺮا ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.f.x‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻤﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 3‬ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در واﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫‪ WAP‬ﻣﻮرد ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎو&ﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪i.x‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ<]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ز ﺮ را در اﺧﺘ‪6‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪k.x‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ>]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ز ﺮ را در اﺧﺘ‪6‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ"ﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺻﺪا‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﺑﻌﻨﻮان‬ ‫آﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈ‪6‬ﻢ ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 181
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ |‬ ‫ذﺧ"ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ +‬ﻓﺎ&ﻞ‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪m.x‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ G‬ﻣ ﺎن ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ 3‬ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎو‪ 3‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ اﺳﺖ ‪4‬ﻪ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ‪6‬ﺖ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺗﺒﺎدل ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﺎ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﻧﻤ ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪4‬ﻠ‪6‬ﺪ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ )اﮔﺮ ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻮد(‪ ،‬آﻧﺮا ﺣﺬف ‪4‬ﺮده ﺎ از‬ ‫ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ا ﻨ ﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ را از ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ﺧﻮد در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ را در ﻣﻨﻮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ‪4‬ﺮد‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮا ﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻ‪6‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﻢ ﻫ‪6‬ﭻ ﭼ‪6‬ﺰ‪ 3‬در ا ﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﺮ ﺰ ﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ‪4‬ﭙ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً از‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﮋه ا‪4 3‬ﻪ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻫﻤ‪6‬ﻦ ‪4‬ﺎر در ﺳ د‪ 3‬ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 183
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ |‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ ذﺧ"ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ :+‬ا ﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ G‬ﻣ ﺎن ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪3‬‬‫ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻓﺎ ﻠ را‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋ ﺲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا ﺎ ﺣﺘ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﺎص ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﭘﺸﺘ‪6‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﻧﻤ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫‪ Word‬ﺎ ‪ (Execl‬را ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻦ و داﻧﻠﻮد‬ ‫‪4‬ﺮدن ﺑﻌﺪ‪ 3‬در ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼ د ﮕﺮ‪ ،3‬در ا ﻨﺠﺎ ‪4‬ﭙ ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ‪ 3‬ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ا ﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در )ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫— داﻧﻠﻮدﻫﺎ — ذﺧ‪6‬ﺮه ﺳﺎز‪ 3‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ( ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ وﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺻﺒﺮ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ دﻗ‪6‬ﻘﻪ روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ا ﻦ ‪4‬ﺎر را در ﺣﺎﻟ ‪4‬ﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺑ ﺎر در‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ در آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در&ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪. +‬ﺎﻣﭙ"ﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼ و ا&ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﻣﺪ ﺮ ﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪3‬‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎرﮔﺬار‪ 3‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮا‪ 3‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ زﻣ‪6‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫و آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ‪ 3‬زﻧﮓ و ﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻮدم داﺧﻠ ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ وﺻﻞ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳ د‪ 3‬را ﻧﺼﺐ ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 185
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‪ 3‬ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧ‪6‬ﺎز ﺷﺨﺼ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﻫﺮ ‪4‬ﺪام از آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻬ‪6‬ﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ |‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪ +‬اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫آداﭘﺘﻮر ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗ ‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﺷﺎرژر ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ در ﻣﻮاﻗﻌ ‬ ‫‪4‬ﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﻨﺰل و ﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ‪4‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘ‪6‬ﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ‪4‬ﺎﺑﻞ ﻣ‪6‬ﺘﻮاﻧ‪6‬ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎدل‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ‪4‬ﺎﻣﭙ‪6‬ﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﺗﺮ‪".‬ﺒ اﺳﺘﺮ&ﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﺨﺶ ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﻧ‪3‬ﺘﻪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻤ‪6‬ﺸﻪ از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ اﺻﻠ ‪ LG‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪4‬ﻨ‪6‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‪ LG‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ‪6‬ﺪ‪ .‬در ﻏ‪6‬ﺮ ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‬ ‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺑ‪6‬ﻦ ﺑﺮود‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ\ ﺑﺮا‪ 3‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ‪6‬ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮ‪4‬ﺰ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ‪6‬ﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 187
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‪M6100 :‬‬ ‫ﺳ‪6‬ﺴﺘﻢ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺤ"ﻂ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ |‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ا‪4‬ﺜﺮ ‪) +55°C :‬ﺗﺨﻠ‪6‬ﻪ ﺷﺎرژ(‬ ‫‪) +45°C‬ﺷﺎرژ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪ اﻗﻞ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬
PAGE 188
ENGLISH M6100 USER’S GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 189
TABLE OF CONTENTS \ Table of Contents 2 INTRODUCTION 4 SELECTING FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS 30 GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE 5 PROFILES 31 M6100 FEATURES 9 Parts of the phone Display Information 9 13 Activate Personalise Rename 31 31 32 GETTING STARTED 15 CALL REGISTER 33 Installing the SIM card and battery Charging the Battery Disconnecting the adapter Turning your phone on and off Access codes 15 16 17 18 18 Missed calls Received calls Dialled calls Delete recent calls Call charge
PAGE 190
40 SETTINGS 59 Contacts Calendar Memo Calendar settings 40 43 44 44 MESSAGES 45 New message Inbox Outbox Drafts Listen to voice mail Info message Templates Settings 45 47 49 49 50 50 51 52 Date &Time Phone settings Call settings Security settings Network settings GPRS SETTING Reset settings Memory status 59 59 60 63 64 65 65 65 SERVICE 66 Internet SIM service 67 69 DOWNLOADS 70 MULTIMEDIA 54 MP3 Camera Video camera My Photos My video Voice recorder Settings 54 56 56 57 57 58 58 Games &
PAGE 191
INTRODUCTION \ Introduction 4 Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact M6100 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.
PAGE 192
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE • While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Exposure to radio frequency energy • The SAR limit recommended by the international Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), which is 2W/kg averaged over ten (10) gram of tissue.
PAGE 193
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE \ Guidelines for safe and efficient use • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. • Do not drop. • Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. • The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. • Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit. (Do not use solvent such as benzene, thinner or alcohol.) • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust.
PAGE 194
In aircraft • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause serious injury due to improper performance. • Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any aircraft. Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children’s reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard.
PAGE 195
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE \ Guidelines for safe and efficient use Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean.
PAGE 196
M6100 FEATURES Front view Right side view 2 1 1. Up/down side keys • Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby mode with the phone open. • Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call. 2. Front screen 3 | M6100 features Parts of the phone 4 3. Headset jack • Connect a headset here. 4. Camera/MP3 key Open the slide to reveal the camera lens. • Press this key shortly to enter Multimedia menu directly. • Press this key for a long time to activate MP3.
PAGE 197
M6100 FEATURES \ M6100 features Rear view 1. Camera lens Dirt on the camera lens could affect the image quality. 1 2 2. Flash 3. Holes for a carrying strap 5 3 5. Battery pack 4 6. SIM card socket 6 7. SIM card terminals 7 8 8. Battery terminals 9 10 4. Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover. 9.
PAGE 198
Open view To prevent the difficulty in hearing of the other side, slide open while using phone. 6 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 4 12 1. Earpiece | M6100 features Note 1 2. Left soft key Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 3. Send key Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. You can also quickly access the latest incoming, outgoing and missed calls by pressing the key in standby mode. 4. Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers, letters and some special characters.
PAGE 199
M6100 FEATURES \ M6100 features 5. Microphone Can be muted during a call for privacy. 6. Main screen Displays phone status icons, menu items, Web information, pictures and more in full colour. 7. Navigation keys Use to scroll through menus and move the cursor. 8. Right soft key Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 9. Confirm key Selects menu options and confirms actions. 10. End/Power key Used to end a call or reject a call and also to go back to standby mode.
PAGE 200
The table below describes various display indicators or icons that appear on the phone’s display screen. On-Screen Icons Icon Icon Description Indicates that you are roaming on another network. Indicates that GPRS service is available. Description Indicates the alarm has been set and is on. Indicates the strength of the network signal. ❈ Indicates the status of the battery charge. Indicates a call is in progress. ❈ The quality of the conversation may change depending on network coverage.
PAGE 201
M6100 FEATURES \ M6100 features Icon Description Indicates the General profile is activated. Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP. Indicates that you are using GPRS. Agenda event set Call divert service active Bluetooth enabled Note • When the status of the battery indicates low, you may not use Camera or Multimedia function. • While using Multimedia function, the status of the battery is changeable.
PAGE 202
GETTING STARTED Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery. Press the button to release the battery, then slide the battery down till it stops. Now lift the battery from its compartment. 2. Install the SIM card. Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 203
GETTING STARTED 3. Install the battery. \ Getting started 2. Connect the other end of the mains adapter to the mains socket. Only use the charger included in the box. 3. The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete. Charging the Battery To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery. 16 1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the bottom of the phone until it clicks into place.
PAGE 204
Warning Disconnecting the adapter Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone by pressing its side buttons as shown in the diagram. 1. When charging is finished, the moving bars of the battery icon stop and ‘Full’ is displayed on the screen. | Getting started • Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal teeth or nails come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire.
PAGE 205
GETTING STARTED \ Getting started Turning your phone on and off Access codes Turning your phone ON You can use the access codes described in this section to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be changed by using the Change codes feature [Menu 7-4-6]. 1. Install a battery to the handset and connect the phone to an external power source such as the travel adapter, cigarette lighter adapter or handsfree car kit.
PAGE 206
Security code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is required to access functions such as Advice of Call Charge and Fixed dial number. These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card. Check with your network operator for further information. The security code protects the unauthorised use of your phone. The default security code is set to ‘0000’ and the security code is required to delete all phone entries and to activate the Reset settings menu.
PAGE 207
GENERAL FUNCTIONS Making and answering calls \ General Functions Making a call 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. 2. Enter a phone number, including the area code. • Press and hold the clear key (C) to erase the entire number. 3. Press the send key (S) to call the number. 4. To end the call, press the end key (E) or the right soft key. Making a call from the call history list 1. In standby mode, press the send key (S), and the latest incoming, outgoing and missed phone numbers will be displayed. 2.
PAGE 208
Note If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a call, use the side keys ([) . Press the up side key to increase and down side key to decrease the volume. If Press any key has been set as the answer mode any key press will answer a call except for the E or the right soft key. Note In standby mode with the phone open/closed, pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume.
PAGE 209
GENERAL FUNCTIONS \ General Functions Entering text 123 mode (Number mode) You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the phonebook, writing a message, creating a personal greeting. Type numbers using one keystroke per number. To change to 123 mode in a text entry field, press the # key until 123 mode is displayed. The following text input methods are available in the phone.
PAGE 210
1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, start entering a word by pressing keys 2 to 9. Press one key per letter. • The word changes as letters are typed. Ignore what’s on the screen until the word is typed completely. • If the word is still incorrect after typing completely, press the down navigation key once or more to cycle through the other word options. Example: Press 4 6 6 3 to type Good. Press 4 6 6 3 [down navigation key] to type Home.
PAGE 211
GENERAL FUNCTIONS \ General Functions 24 2. To insert a space, press the 0 key once. To delete letters, press the C key. Press and hold down the C key to clear the whole display. Note Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys. Key Characters in the order display Upper Case Lower Case 1 .,/?!-:’"1 .
PAGE 212
Switching between two calls Rejecting an incoming call To switch between two calls, press the left soft key then select Swap. You can reject an incoming call without answering by simply pressing the E key. Answering an incoming call During a call, you can reject an incoming call by pressing the left soft key [Menu] key and selecting the Conference/Reject or by pressing the E. To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press S the key.
PAGE 213
GENERAL FUNCTIONS \ General Functions 26 Switching DTMF tones on during a call Making a second call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, press the left soft key, and then select DTMF on. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way. DTMF tones allow your phone to make use of an automated switchboard. You can make a second call while currently on a call. Enter the second number and press the S key. When the second call is connected, the first call is automatically placed on hold.
PAGE 214
Ending a conference call To add a call to an existing conference call, press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Join all. Displaying callers in a conference call The currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the E key. To end a conference call, press the left soft key, then select the Conference/End multiparty. To scroll through the numbers of the callers who make up a conference call on the handset screen, use the up/down navigation keys.
PAGE 215
MENU TREE \ Menu Tree 1 PROFILES 1 2 3 4 5 Vibrate only Silent General Loud Headset 3 TOOLS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Alarm clock Bluetooth Calculator Unit converter World time Answering phone Modem 2 CALL REGISTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 28 Missed calls Received calls Dialled calls Delete recent calls Call charges GPRS information 4 ORGANISER 1 2 3 4 Contacts Calendar Memo Calendar settings 5 MESSAGES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 New message Inbox Outbox Drafts Listen to voice mail Info message Templates Settings
PAGE 216
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MP3 Camera Video camera My photos My videos Voice Recorder Settings 7 SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Date &Time Phone settings Call settings Security settings Network settings GPRS setting Reset settings Memory status 8 SERVICE 1 Internet 2 SIM service | Menu Tree 6 MULTIMEDIA 9 DOWNLOADS 1 2 3 4 Games & Apps Images Sounds File Storage 29
PAGE 217
SELECTING FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS \ Selecting Functions and Options 30 Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in the menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked [<] and [>]. Each menu and sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function. The role of the soft keys vary according to the current context or the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role.
PAGE 218
PROFILES In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: Vibrate only, Silent, General, Loud and Headset. Activate Menu 1.x.1 1. A list of profiles is displayed. 2. In the Profiles list, scroll to the profile you want to activate and press the left soft key < [OK] or OK key. 3. Then, select Activate. Personalise • Ring tone: Select the desired ring tone from the list.
PAGE 219
PROFILES • Power on/off volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone when switching the phone on/off. \ Profiles • Auto answer: This function will be activated only when your phone is connected to the headset. - Off: The phone will not answer automatically. - After 5 secs: After 5 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. - After 10 secs: After 10 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. Rename Menu 1.x.3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want.
PAGE 220
CALL REGISTER You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. You can also: The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times. • Enter a new name for the number and save both in the phonebook Menu 2.1 This option lets you view the last 10 unanswered calls.
PAGE 221
CALL REGISTER Delete recent calls Menu 2.4 Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at one time. \ Call register Menu 2.5 Menu 2.5.1 Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times. The following timers are available: • Last call: Length of the last call. • All calls: Total length of all calls made and incoming calls since the timer was last reset.
PAGE 222
GPRS information Menu 2.6 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. Menu 2.6.1 You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volumes Menu 2.6.2 You can check the Sent (Last/All), Received (Last/All) or All data volumes and Reset all.
PAGE 223
TOOLS Alarm clock Menu 3.1 You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. \ Tools 2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press < [OK]. 4. Edit the alarm name and press < [OK]. Bluetooth • MP3: MP3 folder (Menu 6.1.2) • Video (.3GP): video folder (Menu 6.5) • Phonebook contacts (.VCF): Phonebook (Menu 4.1.1) • Other files: File storage folder (Menu 9.4) Note Menu 3.
PAGE 224
Settings Menu 3.2.3 You can register a new device which is compatible with Bluetooth. If you already have added the device, you can connect to it after entering a password (usually 0000). Menu 3.3 This contains the standard functions such as +, –, x, ÷ : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. Furthermore, you can use the various function of calculator such as +/-, sin, cos, tan, log, in, exp, sqrt. 1. Input the numbers by pressing numeric keys. 2.
PAGE 225
TOOLS World time Menu 3.5 You can view clocks of the world’s major cities. 1. Select the city belonged to the time zone by pressing L , R key. Menu 3.6.3 You can adjust the answering phone mode as Driving. User defined 1, 2 Menu 3.6.4/5 \ Tools 2. You can set the current time to the city time you select by pressing the left soft key < [Set]. You can personalize answering phone mode, as you want by recording your voice. Answering phone The submenus • Activate Menu 3.
PAGE 226
Recorded messages Menu 3.6.6 It shows the list of recorded messages including recorder’s name and recorded time at the bottom of the screen. • Playback: You can listen the recorded voice messages. • Call: You can call back to the caller who leave voice message by using this function. • Save: You can save phone number from the recorded voice messages. • Write text message: You can send a short text message to the caller who leave voice message. Menu 3.6.
PAGE 227
ORGANISER Names Menu 4.1 Note In standby mode, press right soft key > [Names] to access directly. \ Organiser Search (Calling from phonebook) Menu 4.1.1 1. Select Search by press the left soft key < [Select] or [OK]. Note Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name you want to search. 2. If you want to edit, delete or copy an entry, select the left soft key < [Options]. The following menu will be displayed.
PAGE 228
Caller groups Menu 4.1.3 You can add up to 20 members per group, with up to a maximum of 7 groups in total. • Member list: Shows the group members you have selected. • Group ring tone: Allows you to specify ring tone for the group members’ call. • Group icon: Allows you to select the icon dependent on Group. • Add member: You can add group members. Each group should not exceed 20 members. • Remove member: You can remove the member from the Group member list.
PAGE 229
ORGANISER • Set memory: Scroll to highlight Set memory, and then press the left soft key < [OK]. - If you select Variable, when adding entry, the phone will ask whether you wish to store on the sim or phone. - If you select SIM or Phone, the phone will store an entry to SIM or phone. \ Organiser - Name only: Set the phonebook list by displaying the name only. 3. You can see the following submenus. • Keep original: When copying, the Original Dial Number is kept.
PAGE 230
Information Menu 4.1.8 • Service dial number • Memory status This feature allows you to see how many entries are in use, or free in your phonebook. 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right soft key > [Names] in standby mode. Select Information by pressing the left soft key < [OK]. 2. Scroll to Memory status, then press the left soft key < [OK]. You can check and save your own number in the SIM card. Calendar Menu 4.2 When you enter this menu a Calendar will be displayed.
PAGE 231
ORGANISER In the scheduler mode, press left soft key < [Options] as follows; Add new Menu 4.2.1 Allows you to add a new schedule for the chosen day. Input the subject and then press the left soft key < [OK]. \ Organiser View daily schedules Menu 4.2.2 You can refer to a detailed schedule, that is the whole contents of the schedule configured by you. Delete past Menu 4.2.3 You can delete the past schedule that is no longer required. Delete all Menu 4.2.4 You can delete all notes.
PAGE 232
MESSAGES Press the Menu key (<) and select Messages using navigation keys. New message Menu 5.1 Write text message Menu 5.1.1 Your phone receives voice mail notification messages and Short Message Service (SMS) messages. When the icon appears, you have received a new voice mail. When the icon appears, you have received a new text message. If the message memory is full, a message is displayed, the icon flashes and you cannot receive any new messages.
PAGE 233
MESSAGES • Exit: If you select this whilst writing a message, you will be taken back to the message menu. Also the written message will not have been saved. \ Messages 46 3. You can also send attachments with the message by pressing the right soft key [Insert], while you’re entering a message. • Images: You can send and receive text messages that contain pictures, known as ‘picture messages’.
PAGE 234
• Save: Saves the multimedia message in drafts or as a template. • Add slide: Adds a slide before or after the current slide. • Move to slide: Moves to the next or previous slide. • Delete slide: Deletes the selected slide. • Set slide format - Swap text and picture: You can switch the position of picture and text of the message. • Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word. This menu will only be shown when the edit mode has been set to T9ABC/T9Abc/T9abc.
PAGE 235
MESSAGES If the phone shows ‘No space for SIM message’, you only have to delete the SIM messages from the Inbox. If the phone displays ‘No space for message’, you will then need to delete messages, media or applications to free up space. • Delete all: You can delete all messages. \ Messages SIM message Specific MMS options SIM message means that the message is exceptionally stored in the SIM card. You can move this message to the phone.
PAGE 236
• Load: Launches the WAP connection to the URL contained in the download message. The phone must be configured for WAP services to download messages. Outbox Menu 5.3 The browsing is same as that for the inbox message. Icon Icon directive MMS sent MMS unsent MMS delivery confirmed SMS sent SMS unsent SMS delivery confirmed When you already sent the message: • View: You can view the sent messages. • Forward: You can forward the current message to other recipients.
PAGE 237
MESSAGES This menu shows the preset multimedia message list. Info message The following options are available. (Dependant to network and subscription) • View: You can see the multimedia messages. • Edit: Allows you to modify the chosen message. • Delete: Deletes the message you choose. • Information: To view the information of the message. \ Messages • Delete all: Deletes all of the messages in the folder. Listen to voice mail Menu 5.
PAGE 238
Templates Menu 5.7 There are pre-defined messages in the list. You can view and edit the template messages or create new messages. Two types of templates are available: Text and Multimedia. Text templates Please call me back. I’m late. I will be there at Where are you now? I am on the way. Top urgent. Please contact. I love you. • Edit: Use this to edit the selected template. • Delete all: Deletes all templates. Multimedia templates Menu 5.7.2 You can use the following options.
PAGE 239
MESSAGES Settings Text message Menu 5.8 Menu 5.8.1 \ Messages • Message types: Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, X.400, Email, ERMES Usually, the type of message is set to Text. You can convert your text into alternative formats. Contact your service provider for the availability of this function. • Validity period: This network service allows you to set how long your text messages will be stored at the message centre.
PAGE 240
• Permitted message types Personal: Personal message. Advertisements: Commercial message. Information: Necessary information. Voice mailbox number Menu 5.8.3 Info message • Receive Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. • Alert • Home: You can listen to voice mails by selecting Home. • Languages Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers.
PAGE 241
MULTIMEDIA MP3 Menu 6.1 The M6100 has an integrated MP3 player built-in. You can enjoy listening to MP3 music files on your phone memory using a compatible headset or via the internal loudspeaker. Note \ Multimedia Because of the small dimension of the speaker, in some cases the audio could be distorted, especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds. Therefore, we recommend you to use the stereo headset in order to appreciate the high quality of your music.
PAGE 242
MP3 player Menu 6.1.1 1. Press MP3 menu, and then select MP3 player. - Equalizer: This menu helps you to adjust a varity of environment on listening to the music. This phone supports four preset menus. When you enter this menu, you can view current value of equalizer. - Playmode: This menu allows to set the play mode. - Set shuffle: You can listen to MP3 music all randomly. Playlist Menu 6.1.2 This menu allows to view the whole play list. You can move the track by pressing the navigation key.
PAGE 243
MULTIMEDIA Camera Menu 6.2 This application enables you to take a still picture. You can take a picture in your desired size, and use it for the contacts photo, home screen and other more general purposes. Once taken, a still image can be sent via Multimedia message. Press the left soft key [Options] to display the following popup menu items. \ Multimedia • Brightness: Determines the brightness. • Size: Determines the size of an image. • Timer: Determines the delay time.
PAGE 244
• Record Time: Determines the recording time. • Album: Shows the video clips recorded. • Slide show: This menu allows you to view as a slide show automatically. • Exit: To exit the Video camera. • Delete: You can delete a picture. • Effect: Determines the special effect to the video clip. • Edit title: You can edit the title of picture. • Flash: Determines the flash operation. • Zoom: Determines the zoom rate. My Videos Menu 6.4 Menu 6.5 You can play and send a video.
PAGE 245
MULTIMEDIA Voice Recorder Menu 6.6 The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. Record Menu 6.6.1 Camera Menu 6.7 Menu 6.7.1 • Auto save: If you set On, the images will be saved automatically without displaying menu bar to save. \ Multimedia You can record a voice memo in the Voice recorder menu. • Delete all photos: This menu allows to delete all photos after asking your confirmation. 1.
PAGE 246
SETTINGS You can set the following menus for your convenience and preferences. Phone settings 1. Press < [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press 7 for direct access to enter Settings. Date & Time Menu 7.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Date Menu 7.1.1 • Date format: You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Menu 7.1.2 • Set Time: You can enter the current time.
PAGE 247
SETTINGS Theme settings Menu 7.2.2 Allows you to choose from one of the preset themes. Language Menu 7.2.3 You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. • If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use. • If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer. • If out of reach Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverage. • All data calls \ Settings Call settings Menu 7.
PAGE 248
• Activate • Any key Activate the corresponding service. To voice mail centre Forwards to message centre. This function is not shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus. To other number Inputs the number for diverting. • Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service. • View status If you select this menu, you can receive a call by only pressing S [Send] key. Send my number Menu 7.3.
PAGE 249
SETTINGS Call waiting (network dependent) Menu 7.3.4 Your phone will not make any attempts to redial when the original call has not connected. • Activate If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call. • Cancel If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize the waiting (receiving) call. • View status \ Settings Shows the status of Call waiting. Minute minder Menu 7.3.5 If you select On, you can check the call duration by a deep sound given every minute during a call.
PAGE 250
5. You can enter your PUK code up to 10 times. If you put wrong PUK code more than 10 times, you can not unlock your phone. You will need to contact your service provider. Handset lock Menu 7.4.2 Auto key lock timeout Menu 7.4.3 This menu allows to set the time of Auto key lock. Call barring Menu 7.4.4 The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password. You can view the following submenus.
PAGE 251
SETTINGS The submenus: • Activate • Number list Allows to request the network to set call restriction on. • Cancel • View status View the status whether the calls are barred or not. \ Settings Menu 7.4.5 You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. • Enable You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. • Disable You can cancel fixed dialling function. 64 Change codes Menu 7.4.
PAGE 252
Network selection Menu 7.5.1 • Automatic If you select Automatic mode, the phone will automatically search for and select a network for you. Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off and on. • Manual • Preferred You can set a list of preferred networks that the phone will attempt to register with first, before attempting to register to any other networks. This list is set from the phone’s predefined list of known networks. Menu 7.5.
PAGE 253
SERVICE You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
PAGE 254
Internet Home Menu 8.1 Menu 8.1.1 Connects to a homepage. The homepage will be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by the service provider if you have not defined it in the activated profile. Bookmarks Menu 8.1.2 These pre-installed bookmarks cannot be deleted. Use the “1” key and * key to enter symbols. To enter “.”, press “1”. After selecting a desired bookmark, the following options are available. • Connect: Connects to the selected bookmark.
PAGE 255
SERVICE Settings Menu 8.1.4 Profiles A profile is the network information used to connect to the Internet. Each profile has submenus as follows: • Activate: Activates the selected profile. \ Service • Settings: Use this to edit and change WAP settings for the selected profile. - Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the address (URL) of a site you want to use as homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the front of each URL as the WAP Browser will automatically add it.
PAGE 256
- DNS settings Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access Secondary server: Input the IP address of the secondary DNS server you access • Rename: You can change the profile name. Security A list of the available certification is shown. • Authority: You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. • Personal: You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone.
PAGE 257
DOWNLOADS Games & Apps Games & Apps Menu 9.1 Menu 9.1.1 In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. The downloaded applications are organised in folders. Press the left soft key < [OK] to open the selected folder or launch the selected midlet. Using the left soft key < [Options], the following menus are available. Note You cannot remove or rename the preinstalled folder or a game in the folder.
PAGE 258
Caution Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition) based programs will run in a phone environment. The J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition) based programs will only run in a PC environment. Profiles Menu 9.1.2 This menu contains the same settings of the Internet menu. In fact, in order to download new applications, a WAP connection is needed. Images Menu 9.2 The left soft key < [Options] will bring up the following options. • Set as wallpaper: Currently selected Picture can be set as a Wallpaper.
PAGE 259
DOWNLOADS • Write messages: Melody Sound can be sent via SMS and MMS. • Send via Bluetooth: Melody Sound can be sent via Bluetooth. File Storage Menu 9.4 This folder is similar to a file storage. It contains all the file transferred through UMS functionality or Bluetooth, as images, sounds and generic files not supported by the phone. \ Downloads 72 Pressing the [Option] softkey, you can view or play the file (if supported), delete it or send it via Bluetooth.
PAGE 260
- Music: In this folder you can copy music files. The supported formats are: MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC++, WMA, MP4 (audio) and WAV. The files in this folder can be played using the MP3 player of the phone. - Photos: This folder is reserved for the pictures taken with the phone’s digital camera. You can transfer the pictures from the phone to the PC using the commands copy and paste of the PC. Note - Storage: This folder is similar to a file storage.
PAGE 261
DOWNLOADS PC programs and Internet You can connect the phone to your PC to manage your phonebook contacts, upload new contents such as wallpapers and ringtones or use the built in modem. 1. Install the programs included in the CD-ROM. 2. On the phone, open the menu Tools – Modem and confirm the activation. 3. Connect the phone to the PC using the USB cable and start the desired program. \ Downloads 74 Note To connect USB, several minutes after power on phone and in the idle window. 4.
PAGE 262
ACCESSORIES There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Standard Battery Hands free earmicrophone and music player controller combo • Stereo headset Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them.
PAGE 263
TECHNICAL DATA General Product name : M6100 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C (discharging) +45°C (charging) Min : -10°C \ Technical Data 76
PAGE 264
77 0168 LG Electronics Inc. Amsterdam Office Veluwezoom 15, 1327 AE Almere, The Netherlands Tel : +31 - 36- 547 - 8940, e-mail : seokim @ lge.com I hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product mentioned above to which this declaration relates complies with the above mentioned standards and Directives Declaration SAR test report (no. TCMA0822545). Issued Date Signature of representative Jin Seog, Kim / Director 7. November . 2005 Name EMC test report(no.
PAGE 265
MEMO 78